Add author's email address.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
16to list them.
6344985d 17
d5483ab1
GM
18** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
19Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if they these are available.
1fa28578
GM
20\f
21* Changes in Emacs 21.1
22
9a8d84ca
DL
23** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
24a version-dependent component.
25
d76c03ea
GM
26** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
27Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
28will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
29character is still bound as before.
30
3b4fa1b2
DL
31** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
32using that menu.
33
40e857ea
DL
34** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
35suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to executable-chmod.
36
c08398de
DL
37** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
38buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
39contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
40by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
41insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
42the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
43Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
44
9a8d84ca 45** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if the
26ae8525
KH
46coding system detector pays attention to ISO2022's escape sequences.
47If this variable is non-nil, the detector ignores such escape
dd7b81cf 48sequences. The default value is nil, and it is recommended not to
26ae8525
KH
49change it except for such a special case that you always want to read
50any escape code verbatimly. If you just want to read a specific file
51without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
52(`universal-coding-system-argument').
53
0b8a3a6d
DL
54** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
55environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
56
57** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
58point in a pop-up window.
59
60** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
61displays all characters in that character set.
62
63** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
64coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
65
5cb6a58e
SM
66** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
67on the context.
68
a1b8d58b
GM
69** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
70
6e417ca5
DL
71** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
72been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
73
5898e075
DL
74** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
75`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
76indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
77indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
78
abfcc168
GM
79** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
80sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 81(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
82You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
83
cc181e95
GM
84** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
85on the display using several methods
86
87- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
88a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
89be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
90
91- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
92equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
93
da4496b6 94- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
95
96- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
97the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
98
3b4fa1b2 99** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 100an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 101command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 102does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 103
176256a1 104** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
105`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
106typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 107
dd0add8e
DL
108** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
109characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
110
699238d9
GM
111** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
112compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
113this behavior.
114
115The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
116compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
117Emacs dump core.
118
119** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 120
7233c5bd
GM
121*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
122whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
123is useful for debugging X problems.
124
125Example:
126
699238d9 127 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 128
100b3cbb
GM
129*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
130visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
131the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
132and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
133visual class names are
134
135 TrueColor
136 PseudoColor
137 DirectColor
138 StaticColor
139 GrayScale
140 StaticGray
141
142Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
143`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
144meaning.
145
146The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
147supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
148`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
149visual.
150
151Example:
152
699238d9 153 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
154
155*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
156specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
157default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
158resource values are `true' or `on'.
159
160Example:
161
699238d9 162 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 163
0d0c76b8
EZ
164** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
165more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
166now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
167
42088c12 168** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 169display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
170shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
171be customized.
c60ea02e 172
31047e0d
DL
173** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
174
b02786f9
GM
175** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
176all frames except the selected one.
177
3261c1d8
DL
178** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
179to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
180
ffe36136
GM
181** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
182the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
183area or with tooltips.
184
559cee90
DL
185** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
186read mail from the menu etc.
187
271b4185
GM
188** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
189a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
190
0daee095
GM
191** Changes in Texinfo mode.
192
193** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
194macros
195
196 Key binding Macro
197 -------------------------
198 C-c C-c C-s @strong
199 C-c C-c C-e @emph
200 C-c C-c u @url
201 C-c C-c q @quotation
202 C-c C-c m @email
203
559cee90
DL
204** Changes in Outline mode.
205
206There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
207`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
208the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
209
404fa7d6
DL
210** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
211groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
212
8964fec7
SM
213** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
214or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
215several other special buffers.
216
39783d73
WP
217** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
218under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
219.emacs file.
220
221The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
222determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
223
d35fce81
GM
224** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
225abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
226`directory-abbrev-alist'.
227
df5a1902
GM
228** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
229is running in batch mode. For example,
230
231 (message "%s" (read t))
232
233will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
234to standard output.
235
a933dad1
DL
236** Faces and frame parameters.
237
238There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
239Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
240`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
241`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
242sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
243for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
244parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
245
246Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
247`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 248`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
249`default' face and vice versa.
250
f77a4a8a
GM
251** New face `menu'.
252
253The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
254Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
255attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
256
a933dad1
DL
257** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
258
259The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
260colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
261correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
262the screen gamma of a frame's display.
263
264PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
265in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
266color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
267
268The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
269`ScreenGamma'.
270
271** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
272
273The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
274Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
275oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
276of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
277the text.
278
279** Emacs has a new face implementation.
280
281The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
282font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
283height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
284These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
285specify a font.
286
287Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
288These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
289under Lisp changes, below.
290
291** New default font is Courier 12pt.
292
293** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
294its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
295it is hollow.
296
297** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
298truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
299foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
300customizing face `fringe'.
301
302** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
303can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
304
305** LessTif support.
306
307Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
308need a version 0.88.1 or later.
309
310** Toolkit scroll bars.
311
312Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
313LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
314configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
315bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
316bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
317Emacs.
318
319When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
320Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
321Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
322Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
323define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
324`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
325
326Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
327a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
328directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
329different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
330system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
331add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
332
333The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
334`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
335This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
336image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
337Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
338
339** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
340
341When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
342widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
343Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
344
345** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
346
347When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
348whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
349defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
350highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
351displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
352whitespace.
353
354** Busy-cursor.
355
356Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
357display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
358
359** Blinking cursor
360
361M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
362terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
363and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
364the group `cursor'.
365
366** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
367
368This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
369generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
370See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
371details.
372
373Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
374have to do anything to activate it.
375
376** Tabs and variable-width text.
377
378Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
379defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
380independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
381Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
382
383** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
384
385*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
386
387 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
388
79dd1637
RS
389The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
390LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 391
79dd1637
RS
392*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
393LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
394
395** Hscrolling in C code.
396
cc181e95
GM
397Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
398`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
399customized.
a933dad1
DL
400
401** Tool bar support.
402
403Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
404how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
405
406** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
407
408Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
409mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
410line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
411about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
412in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
413
414Currently, the following actions have been defined:
415
416- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
417buffers.
418
419- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
420M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
421
422- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
423
559cee90 424- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
425toggles the read-only status.
426
427- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
428
429** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
430
431When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 432from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
433non-nil.
434
435** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
436
437Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
438Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
439the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
440italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
441Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
442attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
443on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
444
445** Sound support
446
2f516940 447Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 448driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 449supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1
DL
450
451** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
452the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
453forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
454value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
455users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
456even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
457
458The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
459
460** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
461
462As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
463drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
464`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
465
466** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
467bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
468
469This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
470`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
471variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
472
473** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
474
475When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
476value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
477number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
478fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
479
480When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
481value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
482number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
483fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
484
485** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
486notably at the end of lines.
487
488All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
489spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
490
eee54b0e
DL
491There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
492
a933dad1
DL
493** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
494query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
495after each match to get the replacement text.
496
d5483ab1
GM
497** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
498you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0
GM
499
500** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
501you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
502lisp-complete-symbol.
503
a933dad1
DL
504** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
505
163ea954
RS
506If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
507longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
508it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
509window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
510
511- User option: max-mini-window-height
512
513Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
514fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
515specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
516
517Default is 0.25.
518
2f72fd2f
GM
519** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
520
0d43b60d
GM
521** Changes to hideshow.el
522
523Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
524selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
525
526*** Generalized block selection and traversal
527
528A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
529(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
530which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
531`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
532point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
533(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
534
535If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
536i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
537backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
538the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
539
540*** Isearch support for updating mode line
541
542During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
543blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
544line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
545portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
546is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
547
548To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
549something like this in your .emacs.
550
551 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
552 (lambda ()
553 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
554
559cee90
DL
555** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
556
557If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
558entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
560
561New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
562buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
563
564Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
565if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
566
567The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
568expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
569cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
570a file.
571
3476b54a
GM
572** Changes in Font Lock
573
574*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
575font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
576mode.
577
b3b98592
GM
578** Comint (subshell) changes
579
580Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
581and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
582
583The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
584buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
585buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
586
587The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
588M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
589the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
590
e26cec67
GM
591** Changes to Rmail mode
592
c0510d27
GM
593*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
594set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
595receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
596recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
597`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
598as correspondent.
599
600Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
601mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 602regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 603
3b55acc9
GM
604*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
605to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
606Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
607with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
608for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
609
6a1950ec
GM
610*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
611like `j'.
612
5bb6f079
RS
613*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
614specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 615digest message.
e26cec67 616
993d8b7d
DL
617*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
618in which folder to put messages automatically.
619
400a1ed0
GM
620** Changes to TeX mode
621
622The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
623`latex-mode'.
624
a933dad1
DL
625** Changes to RefTeX mode
626
627*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
628 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
629 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
630 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
631 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
632 can be edited from that buffer.
633
634*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
635 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
636 `A' to use all marked entries).
637
638*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
639 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
640
641*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
642 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
643 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
644 been cited.
645
38de9631
GM
646** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
647The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
648semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
649in column 1 are always made leaves.
650
a933dad1
DL
651** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
652has the following new features:
653
654*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
655may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
656to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
657time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
658
659*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
660feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
661file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
662compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
663pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
664defaults to 1.
665
b675095c
GM
666** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
667file names.
668
a933dad1
DL
669** Tooltips.
670
671Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
672mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
673can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
674
675Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
676variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
677the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
678tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
679
680** Customize changes
681
682*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
683`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
684cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
685
686*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
687Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
688default).
689
0ae51efb
GM
690*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
691between custom options. Example:
692
693 (defcustom default-input-method nil
694 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
695 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
696 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
697 :group 'mule
698 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
699 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
700
701This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
702current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
703first in a custom-set-variables statement.
704
a933dad1
DL
705** New features in evaluation commands
706
5e03eb84 707*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
708modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
709print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
710customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
711eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
712
5e03eb84
GM
713*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
714code when called with a prefix argument.
715
a933dad1
DL
716** Dired changes
717
718*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
719command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
720is, delete only empty directories.
721
722*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
723command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
724copy directories recursively.
725
f6737cde
GM
726*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
727in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
728the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
729
2f72fd2f
GM
730*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
731replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
732directory.
733
7381ae05
MB
734*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
735a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
736This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
737will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
738accurate or inaccurate as it is.
739
a933dad1
DL
740** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
741use the -f option when sending mail.
742
b1c609b1
GM
743** CC mode changes.
744
745Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
746current user setups (although it's believed that these
747incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
748However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
749back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
750compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
751release.
752
753*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
754When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
755variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
756take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
757is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
758settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
759possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
760Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
761
762By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
763special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
764the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
765of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
766above.
767
768Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
769when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
770function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
771call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
772then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
773values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
774only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
775function documentation for more info.
776
777The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
778especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
779with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
780intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
781such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
782is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
783configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
784global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
785
786(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
787
788**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
789This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
790
791This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
792variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
793completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
794the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
795empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
796style system.
797
798**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
799In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
800c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
801as far as possible.
802
803*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
804CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
805surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
806chapter about this in the manual.
807
808**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
809The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
810recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
811primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
812adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
813
814**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
815This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
816c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
817
818**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
819This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
820
821It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
822Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
823A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
824inside CC Mode.
825
826Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
827causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
828the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
829available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
830cc-mode/).
831
832**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
833The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
834specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
835literals.
836
837**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
838It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
839prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
840you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
841this function.
842
843*** Fixes to IDL mode.
844It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
845to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
846struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
847Thanks to Eric Eide.
848
849*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
850It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
851opening braces hangs and when they don't.
852
853**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
854
855*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
856See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
857better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
858and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
859
860*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
861previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
862the column specified by comment-column.
863
864*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
865In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
866is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
867prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
868contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
869don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
870
871*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
872instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
873arguments.
874
875*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
876
877*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
878c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
879c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
880variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
881Provan).
882
883*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
884
c407c570
GM
885** Makefile mode changes
886
887*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
888
889*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
890Fontlock mode is active.
891
87be76f6
GM
892** Isearch changes
893
c407c570
GM
894** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
895respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
896that started the search.
897
87be76f6 898*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
899selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
900
87be76f6
GM
901*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
902
d35fce81 903Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
904`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
905search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
906before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
907highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
908`secondary-selection'.
909
910The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
911will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
912Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
913using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
914usual snappy response.
915
916If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
917matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
918set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
919isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
920
35384f06
GM
921** Changes in sort.el
922
923The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 924as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
925new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
926numeric base.
87be76f6 927
d7b511c4
GM
928** Changes to Ange-ftp
929
930*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
931names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
932sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
933
d7b511c4
GM
934*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
935ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
936
4b9347b3
GM
937** Shell script mode changes.
938
939Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
940derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
941sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
942
79214ddf
FP
943** Etags changes.
944
945*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
946
aca0be23 947*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
948possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
949{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
950This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
951a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 952
79214ddf
FP
953*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
954declarations when given the --declarations option.
955
956*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 957"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
958
959*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
960types.
961
de370c4c 962*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
963
964*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
965
966*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
967are now tagged.
968
969*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
970variables are tagged.
971
972*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
973
8dc78b52
FP
974*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
975for PSWrap.
79214ddf 976
f6737cde
GM
977** Changes in etags.el
978
3f6e4b8b
GM
979*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
980tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
981is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
982
f6737cde
GM
983*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
984the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
985
986If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
987FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
988TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
989obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
990
991TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
992
993FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
994List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
995
996A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
997
998 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
999 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1000 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1001
1002*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1003of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1004
1005*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1006names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1007
fbc164de
PE
1008** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1009and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1010LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1011
0b8a3a6d
DL
1012** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1013Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
10148859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
1015There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 1016
163ea954 1017** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1018remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1019appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1020
1021** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1022
6f8ea2ae
DL
1023** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1024
c0510d27
GM
1025** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
1026containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1027expression from that list, are not checked.
1028
a933dad1
DL
1029** New modes and packages
1030
5cb6a58e
SM
1031*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1032package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1033be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1034
578979ee
GM
1035*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1036facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1037separate Texinfo file.
1038
dc1178bf
SM
1039*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
1040or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1041provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
1042It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
1043used to enter checkin log messages.
1044
6abca616
EZ
1045*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1046without invoking external programs.
1047
1048The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1049and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1050`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1051is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1052Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1053
1054The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1055page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1056
5e5dff44
GM
1057*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1058authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1059
1060The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1061the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1062the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1063Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1064even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1065single step.
1066
1067On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1068matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1069probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1070contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1071
f7136ee8
GM
1072*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1073unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1074actually modifying content of a buffer.
1075
bbd9b566
GM
1076*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1077PostScript.
1078
1079Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1080
1081The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1082
1083 ; comment (until end of line)
1084 A non-terminal
1085 "C" terminal
1086 ?C? special
1087 $A default non-terminal
1088 $"C" default terminal
1089 $?C? default special
1090 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1091 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1092 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1093 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1094 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1095 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1096 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1097 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1098 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1099 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1100 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1101 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1102 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1103 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1104 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1105
1106Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1107
99453a38
GM
1108*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1109align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1110determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1111example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1112equal signs of assignments.
1113
559cee90
DL
1114*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1115paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1116
6448a6b3
GM
1117*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1118list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1119buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1120customize the package.
1121
6344985d
GM
1122*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1123
249652b1
GM
1124*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1125replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1126is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1127and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1128not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1129which answers different needs.
1130
3476b54a
GM
1131*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1132suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1133expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1134course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1135reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1136to be enabled.
1137
8964fec7
SM
1138*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1139containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1140
a933dad1
DL
1141*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1142
1143*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1144
1145*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1146
1147*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1148Pascal) language.
1149
1150*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1151the text at point.
1152
1153*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1154
8d54eb69
DL
1155*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1156
a933dad1
DL
1157*** whitespace.el ???
1158
ebcfda83
GM
1159*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1160files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1161(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1162interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1163often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1164uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1165codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1166
1167*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1168
1169Here is an example of columns:
1170
1171horse apple bus
1172dog pineapple car EXTRA
1173porcupine strawberry airplane
1174
1175Doing the following settings:
1176
1177 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1178 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1179 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1180 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1181
1182
1183Selecting the lines above and typing:
1184
1185 M-x delimit-columns-region
1186
1187It results:
1188
1189[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1190[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1191[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1192
1193delim-col has the following options:
1194
1195 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1196 before all columns.
1197
1198 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1199 between each column.
1200
1201 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1202 after all columns.
1203
1204 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1205 each column.
1206
1207delim-col has the following commands:
1208
1209 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1210 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1211
f507826c
GM
1212*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1213were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1214is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1215
1216The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1217
1218To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1219
1220To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1221M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1222
1223To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1224M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1225
8062f458
DL
1226*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1227text.
1228
36e24b82 1229*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1230of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1231specific to Message mode.
1232
36e24b82
DL
1233*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1234viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1235with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1236
aaa659ef
DL
1237*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1238interface to access directory servers using different directory
1239protocols. It has a separate manual.
1240
eee54b0e
DL
1241*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1242for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1243
612839b6
GM
1244*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1245
1246*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1247minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1248
399da7e3
DL
1249*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1250with the diary features.
1251
6e417ca5
DL
1252*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1253numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1254
4a27bdfb
GM
1255*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1256Fill mode.
1257
a933dad1
DL
1258** Withdrawn packages
1259
1260*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1261functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1262
3261c1d8
DL
1263*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1264
1265*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1266
1267\f
1268* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1269(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1270
9662da0b
GM
1271** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1272or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1273
7fce7efb
DL
1274** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1275function was declared obsolete.
1276
1277** Function plist-member is renamed from widget-plist-member (which is
1278retained as an alias).
1279
f98d3086
SM
1280** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1281It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1282is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1283
87efd256
GM
1284** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1285
1286- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1287
1288Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1289MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1290
67c9a1d2
GM
1291** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1292
1293- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1294
1295Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1296
1297This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1298calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1299argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1300value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1301returned.
1302
1303Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1304if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1305it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1306minibuffer even if it is active.
1307
1308Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1309counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1310too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1311and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1312`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1313entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1314
1315ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1316ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1317ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1318ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1319ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1320If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1321Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1322
dce6b995 1323** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key
f98d3086 1324and event names in angle brackets.
dce6b995 1325
25fa6deb
GM
1326** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1327call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1328message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1329Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1330
3b4fa1b2 1331** The user option line-number-display-limit can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1332meaning no limit.
1333
c08398de
DL
1334** select-safe-coding-system now also checks the most preferred
1335coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1336DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1337
80c05bd3 1338** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1339of a primitive.
1340
80c05bd3
DL
1341** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1342buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1343This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1344than replacing the local map.
1345
4bc7a543
DL
1346** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1347after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1348
1349** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1350
a933dad1
DL
1351\f
1352* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1353
1354Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1355--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1356When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1357so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1358
0b8a3a6d
DL
1359*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1360`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1361when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1362multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1363
1364*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1365`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1366contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1367
1368*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1369changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1370[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1371regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1372the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1373extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1374bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1375eight-bit-graphic.
1376
1377** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1378
1379A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1380a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1381character set as previously.
1382
1383*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1384They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1385modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1386
1387CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1388characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1389range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1390case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1391
1392FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1393name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1394
1395*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1396registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1397"fontset-default".
1398
1399*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1400argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1401
1402** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1403composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1404buffers and strings.
1405
1406*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1407character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1408code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1409have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1410composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1411composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1412The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1413also been deleted.
1414
1415*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1416specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1417`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1418
1419*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1420MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1421composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1422may differ between buffer and string text.
1423
1424*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1425COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1426
1427*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1428directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1429Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1430`composition' from STRING.
1431
1432*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1433a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1434
1435*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1436obsolete.
1437
1438** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1439Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1440character set is not used.
1441
1442** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1443`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1444X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1445
1446+++
1447** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1448are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 14490xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1450
399da7e3 1451+++
f0124b4a
DL
1452** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1453that offset in the file before writing.
1454
3bbc50af
DL
1455** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1456promised long ago.
1457
f98d3086
SM
1458** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1459compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1460
612839b6
GM
1461** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1462`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1463from which the command was issued.
1464
1465** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1466`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1467`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1468additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1469operate on.
1470
271b4185
GM
1471** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1472to `window-buffer-height'.
1473
1474- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1475
1476Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1477The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1478lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1479
1480Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1481respectively.
1482
1483If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1484COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1485
1486The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1487obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1488on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1489
1490Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1491buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1492possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1493is currently displayed in some window.
1494
3c30cb6e
DL
1495** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1496argument function's results.
1497
62f20204
GM
1498** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1499signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1500
c0510d27
GM
1501** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1502header is the list of headers passed to it.
1503
1504** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1505ignores differences in case and text representation.
1506
1507** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1508cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1509as follows:
1510
1511 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1512 nil don't display a cursor
1513 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1514 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1515 others display a box cursor.
1516
9a0dd3dc
GM
1517** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1518an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1519defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1520set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1521
d7b511c4 1522** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1523specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1524the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1525text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1526
1527Example:
1528
1529 (string-to-syntax "()")
1530 => (4 . 41)
1531
1fa28578
GM
1532** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1533other than 10.
1534
1535*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1536INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1537
1538 #b1111
1539 => 15
1540 #b-1111
1541 => -15
1542
1543*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1544
1545 #o666
1546 => 438
1547
1548*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1549
1550 #xbeef
1551 => 48815
1552
1553*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1554
1555 #2R-111
1556 => -7
1557 #25rah
1558 => 267
1559
3d4ff2dd 1560** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 1561the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
1562and isn't a string.
1563
3d4ff2dd
GM
1564** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1565a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1566value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1567not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1568
16ce590d
DL
1569+++
1570** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1571
73825616 1572** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1573for a regexp in a string.
1574
1575** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1576`mouse-position-function'.
1577
723e779c
GM
1578** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1579that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1580
d1e103b2
GM
1581** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1582Keywords are now always considered constants.
1583
31047e0d
DL
1584+++
1585** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1586returns it.
1587
7a85e4df
GM
1588** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1589returned by function `recent-keys'.
1590
02b14400
RS
1591+++
1592** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1593can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1594Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1595etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1596mode.
404fa7d6 1597
02b14400 1598+++
8964fec7
SM
1599** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1600and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1601
02b14400
RS
1602+++
1603** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1604has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1605function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1606returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1607been performed."
1608
1609When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1610and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1611hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1612then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1613
02b14400 1614+++
81da8b32
GM
1615** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1616In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1617and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1618
02b14400 1619+++
9e207b90
GM
1620** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1621with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1622specified table.
1623
1624 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1625
1626Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1627TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1628saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1629what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1630
02b14400 1631+++
d7f89643 1632** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1633Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1634
02b14400 1635+++
dde9e75a
GM
1636** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1637removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1638
02b14400 1639+++
9da30515
GM
1640** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1641instead of being optional.
1642
02b14400 1643+++
d20679eb
GM
1644** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1645modify read-only text.
1646
02b14400 1647+++
fbc164de
PE
1648** New functions and variables for locales.
1649
1650The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1651decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1652time functions like strftime. The new variables
1653`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1654locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1655
1656The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1657environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1658the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1659environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1660not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1661`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1662`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1663
02b14400 1664+++
863476d1
SM
1665** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1666To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1667modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1668start sequences.
1669
02b14400 1670+++
ef6d912c
GM
1671** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1672because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1673
02b14400 1674+++
a933dad1
DL
1675** New function `propertize'
1676
1677The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1678strings with text properties.
1679
1680- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1681
1682Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1683by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1684PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1685specified value of that property. Example:
1686
1687 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1688
1689+++
1690** push and pop macros.
1691
02b14400
RS
1692Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1693are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1694as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1695
1696(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1697(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1698 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1699
02b14400
RS
1700** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1701
6c7fd5aa
RS
1702Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1703are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1704
1705(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1706 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1707 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1708 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1709
1710(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1711 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1712 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1713 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1714
a933dad1
DL
1715+++
1716** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1717as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1718
1719[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1720[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1721[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1722[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1723[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1724 space, and DEL.
1725[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1726 and DEL.
1727[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1728 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1729 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1730[:alpha:] matches letters.
1731 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1732 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1733[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1734[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1735[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1736[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1737 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1738 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1739[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1740[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1741[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1742
1743+++
1744** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1745
1746The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1747
1748- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1749
1750The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1751are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1752
1753:test TEST
1754
1755TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1756Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1757it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1758
1759:size SIZE
1760
1761SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1762many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1763
1764:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1765
1766REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1767full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1768size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
17691.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1770old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1771
1772:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1773
1774THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1775hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1776(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1777
1778:weakness WEAK
1779
1780WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1781Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1782their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1783hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1784
1785- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1786
1787Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1788
1789- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1790
1791Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1792
1793- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1794
1795Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1796values are shared.
1797
1798- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1799
1800Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1801
1802- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1803
1804Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1805
1806- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1807
1808Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1809
1810- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1811
1812Returns the size of TABLE.
1813
1814- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1815
1816Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1817
1818- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1819
1820Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1821
1822- Function: clrhash TABLE
1823
1824Clear TABLE.
1825
1826- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1827
1828Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1829not found.
1830
79214ddf 1831- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1832
1833Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1834another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1835
1836- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1837
1838Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1839
1840- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1841
1842Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1843arguments KEY and VALUE.
1844
1845- Function: sxhash OBJ
1846
1847Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1848
1849- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1850
1851Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1852a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1853comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1854and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1855of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1856
1857TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1858
1859HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1860code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1861integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1862
1863Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1864be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1865
1866 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1867 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1868
1869 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1870 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1871
79214ddf 1872 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1873 'case-fold-string-hash))
1874
1875 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1876
1877+++
1878** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1879
1880It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1881circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1882a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1883
1884+++
1885** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1886
1887If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1888#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1889
a933dad1
DL
1890+++
1891** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1892t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1893specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1894is too short to reach that column.
1895
1896+++
1897** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1898now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1899after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1900two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1901
1902If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1903perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1904and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1905
1906+++
1907** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1908to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1909
1910+++
1911** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1912calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1913
1914+++
1915** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1916directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1917small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1918small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1919temporary-file-directory instead.
1920
1921+++
1922** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1923the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1924`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1925hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1926
1927+++
1928** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1929elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1930
1931+++
1932** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1933
1934make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1935creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1936ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1937
1938+++
1939** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1940
1941The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1942on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1943is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1944never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1945ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1946overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1947
1948If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1949that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1950to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1951The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1952
1953+++
1954** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1955
1956Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1957If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1958ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1959result string.
1960
1961Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1962string where arguments appear in the result string.
1963
1964Example:
1965
1966 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1967 (s2 "world"))
1968 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1969 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1970 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1971
1972results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1973
1974+++
1975** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1976
1977Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1978The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1979argument in it.
1980
1981 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1982 (arg "world"))
1983 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1984 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1985 (message msg arg))
1986
1987+++
1988** Sound support
1989
1990Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1991(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1992
1993Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1994(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1995to enable sound support.
1996
1997Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1998list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1999when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2000functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2001sound to play, before playing the sound.
2002
2003The following sound properties are supported:
2004
2005- `:file FILE'
2006
2007FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2008searched relative to `data-directory'.
2009
6fb40beb
GM
2010- `:data DATA'
2011
2012DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2013may be present, but not both.
2014
a933dad1
DL
2015- `:volume VOLUME'
2016
2017VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
20180..1. This property is optional.
2019
2020Other properties are ignored.
2021
2022** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2023
2024** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2025a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2026
2027** Changes to garbage collection
2028
2029*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2030of live and free strings.
2031
2032*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2033strings that have been consed so far.
2034
a933dad1 2035\f
04545643
GM
2036* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2037Lisp Manual
2038
9a8d84ca
DL
2039+++
2040** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2041
2042** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2043image.
2044
2045- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2046
2047Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2048
2049SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2050measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2051character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2052font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2053FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2054
0b8a3a6d
DL
2055** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2056satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2057
2058+++
2059** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2060optional.
2061
04545643
GM
2062** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
2063
2064When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
2065around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
2066at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
2067properties and overlays that apply to the image.
2068
2069\f
a933dad1
DL
2070* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2071
2072Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2073--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2074When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2075so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2076
f6d3257b
GM
2077** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2078to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2079
2080Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2081text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2082is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2083your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2084laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2085just display it black instead.
2086
2087This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2088a line like
2089
2090 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2091
2092in your `.emacs'.
2093
a933dad1
DL
2094** New face implementation.
2095
2096Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2097font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2098
2099+++
2100*** New faces.
2101
2102Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2103
2104 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2105
a933dad1
DL
2106 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2107 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2108
a933dad1 2109 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2110
a933dad1 2111 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2112
a933dad1 2113 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2114
a933dad1 2115 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2116
a933dad1
DL
2117 7. Background color.
2118
2119 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2120
2121 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2122
2123 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2124
2125 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2126
2127 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2128 color.
2129
2130 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2131 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2132
2133Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2134same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2135frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2136faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2137with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2138attributes mentioned above.
2139
2140There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2141definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2142created frames.
79214ddf 2143
a933dad1
DL
2144A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2145have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2146`fully-specified'.
2147
2148+++
2149*** Face merging.
2150
2151The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2152combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2153aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2154properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2155that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2156results in a fully-specified face.
2157
2158+++
2159*** Face realization.
2160
2161After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2162merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2163realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2164available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2165face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2166cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2167
2168Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2169character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2170for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2171charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2172
2173Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2174specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2175being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2176the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2177statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2178
2179In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2180`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
21810x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2182the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2183initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2184Emacs.
2185
2186Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2187`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2188registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2189with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2190
2191++++
2192**** Clearing face caches.
2193
2194The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2195on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2196unused fonts.
2197
2198+++
2199*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2200
a933dad1
DL
2201Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2202given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2203for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2204
2205If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2206pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2207family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2208property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2209an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2210
2211Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2212against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2213match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2214
2215Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2216
2217The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2218attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2219face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2220names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2221that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2222width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2223to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2224
2225Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2226specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2227face doesn't exist.
2228
2229+++
2230**** Scalable fonts
2231
2232Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2233since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2234servers.
2235
2236To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2237`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2238scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2239Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2240scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2241that list. Example:
2242
2243 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2244
2245allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2246
2247+++
2248*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2249
2250- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2251
2252Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2253is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2254string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2255
2256If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2257the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2258FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2259POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2260SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2261These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2262if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2263REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2264the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2265of the face font sort order.
2266
79214ddf 2267- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2268
2269Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2270omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2271(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2272non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2273
2274- Variable: font-list-limit
2275
2276Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2277won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2278matching font. The default is currently 100.
2279
2280+++
2281*** Setting face attributes.
2282
2283For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2284with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2285implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2286`face-attribute'.
2287
2288Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2289symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2290
2291The following attributes are recognized:
2292
2293`:family'
2294
2295VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2296or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2297and `?' are allowed.
2298
2299`:width'
2300
2301VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2302It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2303`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2304`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2305
2306`:height'
2307
2308VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
23091/10 pt.
2310
2311`:weight'
2312
2313VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2314symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2315`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2316
2317`:slant'
2318
2319VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2320symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2321`reverse-oblique'.
2322
2323`:foreground', `:background'
2324
2325VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2326
2327`:underline'
2328
2329VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2330VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2331a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2332don't underline.
2333
2334`:overline'
2335
2336VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2337VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2338string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2339overline.
2340
2341`:strike-through'
2342
2343VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2344striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2345face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2346is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2347
2348`:box'
2349
2350VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2351around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2352VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2353of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2354and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2355VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2356:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2357the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2358specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2359defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2360the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2361color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2362should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2363like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2364that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2365the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2366box.
2367
2368`:inverse-video'
2369
2370VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2371inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2372
2373`:stipple'
2374
2375If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2376The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2377searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2378HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2379is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2380explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2381
2382For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2383and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2384
2385`:font'
2386
2387Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2388XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2389is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2390versions of Emacs.
2391
2392For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2393be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2394must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2395
2396Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2397`defface'.
2398
2399*** Face attributes and X resources
2400
2401The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2402from X resources:
2403
2404 Face attribute X resource class
2405-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2406 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2407 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2408 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2409 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2410 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2411 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2412 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2413 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2414 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2415 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2416 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2417 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2418 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2419 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2420 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2421 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2422 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2423 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2424 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2425
2426+++
2427*** Text property `face'.
2428
2429The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2430specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2431specification can be
2432
24331. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2434
24352. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2436 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2437 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2438 for face attribute names.
2439
24403. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2441 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2442 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2443
2444+++
2445** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2446
acf3ecb7
EZ
2447The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2448on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2449the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2450default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2451`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2452used to clear the mapping table.
2453
acf3ecb7
EZ
2454** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2455
2456The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2457and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2458type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2459color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2460display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2461old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2462`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2463compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2464should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2465modify their color-related behavior.
2466
2467The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2468any frame type.
2469
8a5719f0
EZ
2470** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2471
2472The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2473`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2474`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2475`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2476`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2477`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2478display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2479the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2480platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2481
a933dad1
DL
2482+++
2483** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2484
463cac2d 2485This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2486
2487The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2488end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2489Otherwise, it returns zero.
2490
463cac2d
GM
2491** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2492
2493There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2494buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2495text-property.
2496
9a9dfda8 2497Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2498forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2499to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2500not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2501commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2502boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2503`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2504functions.
463cac2d
GM
2505
2506Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2507a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2508editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2509
9a9dfda8
GM
2510The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2511
2512- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2513
2514Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2515A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2516If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2517constrained position if that is is different.
2518
2519If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2520positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2521ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2522constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2523as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2524is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2525fields.
2526
2527If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2528NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2529unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2530C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2531only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2532
2533- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2534
2535Erases the field surrounding POS.
2536A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2537If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2538
2539- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2540
2541Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2542A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2543If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2544If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2545field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2546
2547- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2548
2549Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2550A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2551If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2552If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2553then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2554
2555- Function: field-string &optional POS
2556
2557Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2558A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2559If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2560
2561- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2562
2563Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2564A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2565If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2566
a933dad1
DL
2567+++
2568** Image support.
2569
2570Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2571strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2572(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2573replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2574
2575If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2576`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2577AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2578window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2579area.
2580
2581IMAGE is an image specification.
2582
2583*** Image specifications
2584
2585Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2586is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2587specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2588symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2589described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2590
2591The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2592
2593`:ascent ASCENT'
2594
576da55d
GM
2595ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2596If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
2597to use for its ascent.
2598
2599If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2600image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2601
04545643
GM
2602If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
2603centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2604of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2605overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2606
2607`:margin MARGIN'
2608
79214ddf 2609MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2610margin around the image. Default is 0.
2611
2612`:relief RELIEF'
2613
2614RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2615around an image.
2616
2617`:algorithm ALGO'
2618
2619Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2620be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2621supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2622which is intended to display images "disabled."
2623
2624`:heuristic-mask BG'
2625
2626If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2627background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2628determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2629corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2630the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2631be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2632background of the image.
2633
2634`:file FILE'
2635
2636Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2637search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2638building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2639may be present in the image specification.
2640
518df5c4
GM
2641`:data DATA'
2642
2643Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2644supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2645present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2646support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2647
a933dad1
DL
2648*** Supported image types
2649
b246b1f6 2650**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2651
2652XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2653properties supported are
2654
2655`:foreground FG'
2656
2657FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2658is the frame's foreground.
2659
2660`:background FG'
2661
2662BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2663the frame's background color.
2664
2665XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2666case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2667instead of a `:file' property.
2668
2669`:width WIDTH'
2670
2671WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2672
2673`:height HEIGHT'
2674
2675HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2676
2677`:data DATA'
2678
2679DATA must be either
2680
2681 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2682 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2683
2684 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2685
2686 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2687 bitmap.
2688
c76e04a8
GM
2689 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2690 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2691 in the file.
2692
a933dad1
DL
2693**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2694
2695XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2696`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2697found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2698`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2699
2700Additional image properties supported are:
2701
2702`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2703
2704SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2705name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2706name.
2707
2708XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2709add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2710
a933dad1
DL
2711The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2712to display compressed images.
2713
2714**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2715
2716PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2717mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2718defined.
2719
2720**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2721
2722Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2723package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2724are:
2725
a933dad1
DL
2726**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2727
2728Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2729package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2730properties defined.
2731
2732**** GIF, image type `gif'
2733
2734Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2735`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2736
2737Additional image properties supported are:
2738
2739`:index INDEX'
2740
2741INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2742multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2743
2744This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2745For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2746at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2747every 0.1 seconds.
2748
2749(defun show-anim (file max)
2750 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2751 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2752
2753(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2754 (when (= idx max)
2755 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2756 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2757 (save-excursion
2758 (set-buffer buffer)
2759 (goto-char (point-min))
2760 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2761 (insert-image img "x"))
2762 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2763
2764**** PNG, image type `png'
2765
2766Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2767package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2768properties defined.
2769
2770**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2771
2772Additional image properties supported are:
2773
2774`:pt-width WIDTH'
2775
2776WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2777integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2778
2779`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2780
2781HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2782must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2783
2784`:bounding-box BOX'
2785
2786BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2787the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2788files. This is an required property.
2789
2790Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2791lisp/gs.el.
2792
2793*** Lisp interface.
2794
79214ddf
FP
2795The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2796which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2797
2798Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2799they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2800The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2801manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2802images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2803
2804*** Simplified image API, image.el
2805
2806The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2807creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2808can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2809define an image based on available image types. The functions
2810`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2811buffer.
2812
2813+++
2814** Display margins.
2815
2816Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2817and images.
2818
2819To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2820`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2821`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2822obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2823`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2824the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2825of the display margins.
2826
2827You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2828containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2829one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2830string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2831in this file).
2832
2833+++
2834** Help display
2835
2836Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2837moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2838`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2839that have a `help-echo' property.
2840
9662da0b
GM
2841If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
2842is called with two arguments OBJECT and POSITION. OBJECT is the
2843buffer or string which had the `help-echo' property. POSITION is
2844the position within OBJECT under the mouse pointer. The function
2845should return a help string or nil for none.
d5aa31d8 2846
9662da0b
GM
2847If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
2848string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
2849
2850For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
2851determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
2852property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
2853For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
2854used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
2855
2856The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2857help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2858help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2859
2860+++
2861** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2862
2863The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2864This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2865
2866The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2867scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2868The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2869scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2870used.
2871
79214ddf
FP
2872 (global-set-key [A-down]
2873 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2874 (interactive)
79214ddf 2875 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2876 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2877 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2878 #'(lambda ()
2879 (interactive)
79214ddf 2880 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2881 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2882
2883+++
2884** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2885
2886Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2887when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2888variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2889is called with one argument, POS.
2890
2891At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2892characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2893as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2894property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2895`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2896
2897+++
2898** Tool bar support.
2899
2900Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2901parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2902controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2903suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2904`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2905automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2906
2907*** Tool bar item definitions
2908
2909Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2910`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2911where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2912
a933dad1
DL
2913CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2914evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2915the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2916property (see below).
79214ddf 2917
a933dad1
DL
2918BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2919binding are currently ignored.
2920
2921The following properties are recognized:
2922
2923`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2924
a933dad1
DL
2925FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2926or disabled.
79214ddf 2927
a933dad1 2928`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2929
a933dad1 2930FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2931
a933dad1
DL
2932`:filter FUNCTION'
2933
2934FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2935FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2936used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2937
a933dad1
DL
2938`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2939
2940TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2941and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2942
a933dad1
DL
2943`:image IMAGES'
2944
2945IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2946image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2947meaning of each of the four elements:
2948
2949 Index Use when item is
2950 ----------------------------------------
2951 0 enabled and selected
2952 1 enabled and deselected
2953 2 disabled and selected
2954 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2955
4ba7246d
GM
2956If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
2957algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
2958
a933dad1 2959`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2960
a933dad1
DL
2961Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2962is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2963
2964*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2965
2966If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2967resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2968than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2969
79214ddf 2970If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2971raised when the mouse moves over them.
2972
2973You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2974`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2975pixels. Default is 1.
2976
2977You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2978`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2979
2980*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2981
2982You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2983a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2984
2985 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2986 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2987 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2988
2989is the original tool bar item definition, then
2990
2991 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2992
2993makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2994item.
2995
2996** Mode line changes.
2997
2998+++
2999*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3000
3001The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3002that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3003a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3004
30051. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3006a `local-map' text property.
3007
30082. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3009that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3010
30113. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3012is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3013`local-map' property.
3014
3015The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3016properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3017example.
3018
54522c9f
GM
3019*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3020evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3021
a933dad1
DL
3022+++
3023*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3024variable mode-line-format to nil.
3025
3026+++
3027*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3028
3029This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3030`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3031completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3032`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3033line.
3034
3035The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3036`header-line'.
3037
3038The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3039position in the header-line.
3040
3041+++
3042** Text property `display'
3043
3044The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3045also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3046`display' property should be a display specification, as described
3047below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3048
3049*** Variable width and height spaces
3050
3051To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3052specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3053`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3054area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3055marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3056displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3057simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3058
3059The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3060PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3061properties described below.
3062
3063The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3064characters having the `display' property.
3065
3066- :width WIDTH
3067
3068Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3069character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3070
3071- :relative-width FACTOR
3072
3073Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3074first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3075same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3076width of that character by FACTOR.
3077
3078- :align-to HPOS
3079
3080Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3081value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3082
3083Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3084
3085- :height HEIGHT
3086
3087Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3088normal line height.
3089
3090- :relative-height FACTOR
3091
3092The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3093of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3094
3095- :ascent ASCENT
3096
3097Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3098used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3099baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3100equal to 100.
3101
3102You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3103
3104*** Images
3105
3106A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3107. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3108in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3109their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3110the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3111`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3112area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3113the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3114as display specification.
3115
3116*** Other display properties
3117
3118- :space-width FACTOR
3119
3120Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3121should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3122integer or float.
3123
3124- :height HEIGHT
3125
3126Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3127
3128If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3129means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3130the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3131``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3132a font is available counts as a step.
3133
3134If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3135as tall as the frame's default font.
3136
3137If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3138height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3139
3140Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3141`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3142
3143- :raise FACTOR
3144
3145FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3146font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3147raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3148amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3149`:height' subproperty.
3150
3151*** Conditional display properties
3152
3153All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3154has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3155applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3156During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3157the text having the `display' property.
3158
3159The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3160`(:when t SPEC)'.
3161
3162+++
3163** New menu separator types.
3164
3165Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3166item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3167treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3168to specify other menu separator types.
3169
3170- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3171
3172No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3173separator occurs.
3174
3175- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3176
3177A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3178
3179- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3180
3181A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3182
3183- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3184
3185A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3186
3187- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3188
3189A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3190
3191- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3192
3193A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3194displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3195
3196- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3197
3198A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3199
3200- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3201
3202A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3203
3204- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3205
3206A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3207
3208- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3209
3210Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3211
3212- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3213
3214Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3215
3216- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3217
3218Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3219
3220- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3221
3222Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3223
3224Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3225the corresponding single-line separators.
3226
3227+++
3228** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3229
3230The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3231`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3232Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3233that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3234default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3235default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3236default foreground is black.
3237
3238The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3239(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3240`ScrollBarBackground').
3241
3242Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3243settings for scroll bar colors.
3244
3245+++
3246** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3247display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3248
3249---
3250** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3251starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3252on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3253line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3254the original window start.
3255
3256---
3257** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3258`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3259now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3260
3261+++
3262** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3263
3264A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3265`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3266windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3267other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3268
3269The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3270fixed-width and fixed-height.
3271
3272 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3273
3274A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3275fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3276window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3277change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3278temporarily to nil, for example
3279
3280 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3281 (enlarge-window 10))
3282
79214ddf 3283Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3284or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3285
3286** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3287terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3288to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3289overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3290horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3291support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050
DL
3292^L
3293* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3294
3295** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3296input.
3297
3298** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3299
3300** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3301
3302** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3303only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3304exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3305(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3306(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3307
3308** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3309been added.
3310
3311^L
3312* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3313
3314** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3315
e33b0397
DL
3316^L
3317* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3318
3319** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3320M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
3321\f
3322* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3323
3324** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3325
3326You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3327Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3328`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3329
3330If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3331is the one that is used.
3332
3333** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3334the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3335Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3336separate from the command's regular output.
3337Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3338says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3339In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3340the buffer name.
3341
3342When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3343output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3344it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3345cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3346
3347** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3348the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3349is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3350created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3351
3352** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3353example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3354match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3355quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3356
3357** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3358now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3359if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3360they never ignore case.
3361
3362** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3363under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3364applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3365of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3366just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3367convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3368part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3369
3370If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3371the same format that was used in the file before.
3372
3373You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3374`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3375
3376** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3377renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3378This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3379
3380** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3381The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3382buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3383your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3384is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3385end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3386Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3387
3388The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3389eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3390control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3391format. You can now customize these variables.
3392
3393** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3394filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3395filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3396enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3397
3398** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3399in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3400windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3401
3402** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3403dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3404doesn't have any effect.
3405
3406** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3407not one per buffer.
3408
3409** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3410use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3411 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3412
3413** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3414To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3415`auto-show-mode' command.
3416
3417** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3418avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3419versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3420choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3421occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3422
3423** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3424cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3425
3426** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3427character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3428feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3429
3430** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3431the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3432interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3433and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3434
3435** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3436
3437The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3438that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3439one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3440codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3441set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3442
3443Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3444from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3445
3446IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3447equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3448a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3449`?' on other systems.
3450
3451IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3452feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3453Unix.
3454
3455Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3456current codepage when it starts.
3457
3458** Mail changes
3459
feab4fba
GM
3460*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3461`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3462appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3463non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3464MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3465headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3466latin-1:
3467
3468 MIME-version: 1.0
3469 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3470 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3471
a933dad1
DL
3472*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3473default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3474default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3475sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3476buffer-file-coding-system.
3477
3478You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3479sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3480mail.
3481
3482*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3483if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3484Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3485list of possible coding systems.
3486
3487** CC Mode changes
3488
3489*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3490modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3491longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3492docstring for details.
3493
3494*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3495symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3496found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3497prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3498lineup functions use this feature currently.
3499
3500*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3501"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3502
3503*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3504"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3505
3506*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3507from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3508symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3509c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3510anonymous classes.
3511
3512*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3513syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3514
3515*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3516inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3517support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3518function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3519
3520*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3521(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3522brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3523c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3524(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3525
3526*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3527
3528*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3529
3530*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3531for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3532
3533*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3534
3535*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3536associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3537This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3538circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3539class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3540
3541** Gnus changes.
3542
3543*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3544added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3545Gnus manual for the full story.
3546
3547*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3548before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3549group, which is created automatically.
3550
3551*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3552values.
3553
3554*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3555
3556*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3557outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3558
3559*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3560`C-u C-c C-c'.
3561
3562*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3563
3564*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3565re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3566
3567*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3568
3569*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3570Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3571
3572*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3573`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3574
3575*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3576control over simplification.
3577
3578*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3579
3580*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3581limit.
3582
3583*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3584
3585*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3586
79214ddf 3587*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3588If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3589rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3590
3591*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3592`a' forces normal posting method.
3593
3594*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3595-- `W d'.
3596
3597*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3598to a non-nil value.
3599
3600*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3601where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3602
3603*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3604has been added.
3605
3606*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3607
3608*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3609
3610*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3611`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3612
3613*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3614`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3615
3616*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3617
3618*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3619been added.
3620
3621*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3622`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3623
3624*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3625updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3626
3627*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3628
3629*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3630
3631*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3632
3633** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3634
3635*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3636options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3637nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3638
3639*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3640TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3641of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3642TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3643can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3644
3645*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3646All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3647but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3648the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3649
3650*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3651the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3652buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3653mismatch.
3654
3655** Changes to RefTeX mode
3656
3657*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3658file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3659
3660*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3661lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3662characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3663removed from the label.
3664
3665*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3666a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3667
3668*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3669customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3670
3671*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3672`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3673expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3674
3675*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3676
3677** New/deleted modes and packages
3678
3679*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3680SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3681
3682*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3683editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3684SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3685
3686*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3687changes with a special face.
3688
3689*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3690this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3691Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3692\f
3693* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3694
3695** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3696This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3697conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3698and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3699check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3700
3701The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3702Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3703distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3704
3705** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3706MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3707controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3708directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3709Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3710on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3711string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3712program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3713printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3714
3715** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3716output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3717available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3718input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3719temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3720program.
3721
3722An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3723and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3724programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3725automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3726as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3727ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3728
3729** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3730a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3731MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3732was not documented clearly before.
3733
3734** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3735This includes Tetris and Snake.
3736\f
3737* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3738
3739** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3740return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3741They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3742meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3743
3744** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3745WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3746and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3747
3748** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3749
3750*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3751It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3752
3753*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3754the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3755integers.
3756
3757** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3758files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3759arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3760file names and attributes are returned.
3761
3762** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3763sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3764accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3765It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3766returns the result.
3767
3768** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3769to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3770
3771** New functions for base64 conversion:
3772
3773The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3774into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3775performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3776optionally.
3777
3778Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3779job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3780
3781**
3782The new function process-running-child-p
3783will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3784terminal to its own child process.
3785
3786** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3787when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3788to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3789itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3790
3791** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3792be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3793
3794** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3795:included is an alias for :visible.
3796
3797easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3798easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3799to move or copy menu entries.
3800
3801** Multibyte editing changes
3802
3803*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3804an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3805make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3806work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3807char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3808 (setq char (sref str idx)
3809 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3810The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3811
3812If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3813(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3814 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3815
3816*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3817region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3818deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3819
3820 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3821
3822This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3823across the boundary.
3824
3825*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3826`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3827 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3828 contains 8-bit characters.
3829 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3830 contains invalid characters.
3831
3832*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3833text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3834preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3835text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3836way.
3837
3838*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3839If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3840end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3841prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3842
3843*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3844compose Thai characters in a string.
3845
3846** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3847argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3848for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3849menus should always use the third argument.
3850
3851** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3852read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3853arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3854input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3855
3856** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3857of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3858programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3859inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3860
3861** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3862the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3863returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3864echo area contents.
3865
3866 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3867
3868** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3869NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3870requested feature cannot be loaded.
3871
3872** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3873foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3874means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3875
3876** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3877gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3878
3879** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3880read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3881unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3882end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3883
3884** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3885the gap of the current buffer.
3886
3887** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3888to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3889current buffer.
3890
3891** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3892facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3893These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3894it back in after any modifications have been made.
3895\f
3896* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3897
3898** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3899the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3900/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3901directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3902subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3903
3904Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3905names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3906Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3907which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3908these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3909
3910Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3911starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3912time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3913
3914This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3915Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3916to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3917subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3918`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3919results.
3920
3921** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3922GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3923that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3924fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3925\f
3926* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3927
3928** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3929including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3930it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3931perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3932
3933** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3934specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3935region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3936further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3937command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3938within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3939are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3940region.
3941
3942In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3943selective undo.
3944
3945** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3946unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3947buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3948effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3949Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3950
3951The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3952though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3953-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3954load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3955
3956** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3957no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3958enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3959something that most users not do.
3960
3961** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3962operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3963The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3964applications.
3965
3966C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3967pasting operations.
3968
3969** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3970setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3971like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3972printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3973`ps-printer-name'.
3974
3975** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3976minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3977any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3978except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3979incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3980hits a new word.
3981
3982Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3983Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3984to be confused by TeX commands.
3985
3986You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3987correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3988clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3989of various alternative replacements and actions.
3990
3991Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3992the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3993corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3994alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3995flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3996
3997Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3998flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3999
4000** Changes in input method usage.
4001
4002Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4003the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4004respectively.
4005
4006You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4007
4008If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4009of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4010
4011The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4012that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4013
4014 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4015
4016 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4017
4018 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4019 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4020
4021 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 4022 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
4023 o When you are using a complex input method.
4024 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4025
4026If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4027input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4028and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4029setting it to t is helpful.
4030
4031The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4032
4033In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4034keys:
4035 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4036 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4037 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4038These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4039environment.
4040
4041** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4042names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4043minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4044get
4045
4046 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4047
4048which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4049
4050Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4051Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4052
4053** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4054at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4055its owner and group.
4056
4057** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4058Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4059
4060** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4061contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4062
4063** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4064which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4065in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4066by the left edge of the rectangle.
4067
4068** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4069increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4070C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4071for writing keyboard macros.
4072
4073** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4074files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4075frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4076the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4077additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4078info.
4079
4080** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4081
4082** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4083query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4084contents only.
4085
4086** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4087confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4088the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4089says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4090
4091** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4092non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4093literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4094
4095** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4096now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4097Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4098inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4099
4100** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4101failure if the command produces no output.
4102
4103** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4104manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4105the mouse.
4106
4107** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4108mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4109function and variable names.
4110
4111** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4112reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4113file-coding-system-alist.
4114
4115** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4116t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4117converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4118the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4119according to the current fontset.
4120
4121** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4122
4123The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4124that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4125nonascii-insert-offset.
4126
4127For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4128enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4129nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4130characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4131
4132** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4133an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4134
4135** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4136letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4137
4138** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4139are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4140command keys.
4141
4142** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4143user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4144
4145Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4146user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4147all variables that have documentation.
4148
4149** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4150shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4151that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4152minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4153it should show; the default is 20.
4154
4155Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4156the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4157of your input.
4158
4159** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4160all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4161recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4162argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4163the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4164Newly added options are included as well.
4165
4166If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4167then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4168for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4169
4170This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4171Customize menu.
4172
4173** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4174the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4175
4176** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4177buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4178invoked.
4179
4180** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4181that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4182The default is 1.
4183
4184** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4185syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4186new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4187(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4188sensibly.
4189
4190** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4191
4192** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4193value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4194two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4195
4196** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4197reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4198for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4199every night.
4200
7464346d
GM
4201** Desktop changes
4202
4203*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
4204the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4205
7464346d
GM
4206*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4207and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4208
a933dad1
DL
4209** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4210read and post multi-lingual articles.
4211
4212** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4213doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4214be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4215outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4216the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 4217made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
4218
4219** Mail reading and sending changes
4220
4221*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4222the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4223changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4224toggle.
4225
4226*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4227now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4228summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4229the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4230rmail-default-body-file.
4231
4232*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4233longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4234handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4235
4236*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4237it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4238is evaluated to insert the signature.
4239
4240*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4241outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4242handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4243putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4244transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4245especially interested in trying feedmail.
4246
4247feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4248feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4249provided by feedmail are:
4250
4251**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4252stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4253there is also a queue for draft messages
4254
4255**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4256be prompted for confirmation
4257
4258**** does smart filling of address headers
4259
4260**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4261the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4262can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4263
4264**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4265the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4266/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4267function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4268
4269** Dired changes
4270
4271*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4272files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4273
4274*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4275run Dired on the directory name at point.
4276
4277*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4278files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4279for a specified regexp.
4280
4281** VC Changes
4282
4283*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4284conveniently.
4285
4286*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4287faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4288Dired.
4289
4290VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4291directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4292listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4293currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4294
4295You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4296then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4297vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4298control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4299on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4300
4301All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4302is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4303`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4304the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4305`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4306
4307The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4308toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 4309VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
4310`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4311
4312Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4313ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4314command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4315
4316*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4317file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4318session to resolve them.
4319
4320Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4321resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4322contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4323uses as well).
4324
4325*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4326command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4327you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4328either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4329branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4330If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4331using ediff.
4332
4333** Changes in Font Lock
4334
4335*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4336are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4337use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4338unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4339compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4340
4341** Frame name display changes
4342
4343*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4344frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4345raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4346when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4347
4348*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4349frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4350menu.
4351
4352** Comint (subshell) changes
4353
4354*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4355subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4356with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4357
4358*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4359
4360C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4361that is, the line after the last line you got.
4362You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4363
4364C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4365send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4366the following line.
4367
4368C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4369which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4370previously sent input.
4371
4372C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4373it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4374as the search string.
4375
4376*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4377automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4378
4379** C mode changes
4380
4381*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4382and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4383assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 4384definition.
a933dad1
DL
4385
4386*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4387(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4388Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4389style is still the default however.
4390
4391*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4392
4393*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4394are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4395them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4396
4397*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4398and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4399
4400*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4401namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4402
4403*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4404makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4405
4406*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4407c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4408
4409*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4410should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4411package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4412variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4413
4414** Changes to hippie-expand.
4415
79214ddf 4416*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4417non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4418which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4419
4420*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4421non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4422expanding dynamically.
4423
4424*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4425non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4426
4427*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4428non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4429this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4430expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4431
4432*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4433
4434** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4435
4436*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4437bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4438automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4439bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4440against the first word in the title.
4441
4442*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4443capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4444bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4445lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4446lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4447bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4448
4449*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4450generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4451replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4452bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4453
4454** Changes in vcursor.el.
4455
4456*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4457and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4458variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4459entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4460`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4461in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4462
4463*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4464Editing group once the package is loaded.
4465
4466*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4467generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4468vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4469
4470*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4471vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4472
4473** Ispell changes.
4474
79214ddf
FP
4475*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4476buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4477are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4478
4479*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4480A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4481and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4482defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4483include:
a933dad1
DL
4484
4485 o URLs are automatically skipped
4486 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4487
4488*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4489
4490** Changes to RefTeX mode
4491
4492RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4493large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4494re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4495section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4496
4497*** New recursive parser.
4498
4499The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4500entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4501recursive parser scans the individual files.
4502
4503*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4504
a933dad1
DL
4505Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4506partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4507the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4508
4509 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4510
4511*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4512
4513This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4514
4515 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4516
4517*** Using multiple selection buffers
4518
4519If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4520for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4521
4522 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4523
4524*** References to external documents.
4525
4526The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4527documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4528documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4529macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4530RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4531the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4532The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4533
4534*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4535
4536The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4537and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4538
4539Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4540the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4541
4542*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4543
4544The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4545buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4546
4547*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4548
4549The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4550contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4551`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4552have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4553enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4554at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4555more.
4556
4557*** Support for the varioref package
4558
4559The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4560
4561*** New hooks
4562
4563Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4564and citations are created. These hooks are
4565`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4566`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4567
4568*** Citations outside LaTeX
4569
4570The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4571a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4572
4573*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4574
4575The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4576fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4577fontified, use
4578
4579 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4580
4581** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4582With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4583the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4584directories that contain the same file name.
4585
4586Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4587Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4588file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4589Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4590have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4591names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4592directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4593directory.
4594
4595** New modes and packages
4596
4597*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4598It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4599it, but some do not.
4600
4601*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4602code.
4603
4604*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4605current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4606around in a buffer.
4607
4608Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4609
4610*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4611uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4612be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4613established system of notation similar to Chess.
4614
4615*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4616documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4617guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4618
4619*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4620available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4621system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4622simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4623functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4624the like.
4625
4626*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4627identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4628
4629*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4630within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4631used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4632the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4633
4634*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4635
4636 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4637 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4638 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4639 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4640 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4641 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4642 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4643 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4644 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4645 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4646 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4647
4648 Platform-specific modes:
4649
4650 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4651 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4652 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4653 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4654 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4655 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4656 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4657 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4658 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4659\f
4660* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4661
4662** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4663use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4664That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4665Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4666
4667Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4668you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4669consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4670
4671** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4672and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4673specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4674searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4675
4676** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4677multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4678character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4679environment.
4680
4681** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4682take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4683string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4684current input method for reading this one event.
4685
4686** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4687now control whether to output certain characters as
4688backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4689non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4690characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4691in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4692\f
4693* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4694
4695** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4696of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4697
4698** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4699in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4700always increases point by 1.
4701
4702The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4703considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4704
4705See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4706
4707** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4708Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4709default value changed. For example,
4710
4711 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4712 :type 'integer
4713 :group 'foo
4714 :version "20.3")
4715
79214ddf 4716 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4717 :version "20.3")
4718
4719If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4720default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4721is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4722`:version' in the top level group.
4723
4724This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4725
4726** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4727starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4728
4729However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4730symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4731support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4732to themselves.
4733
4734If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4735this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4736values whatever.
4737
4738** There is a new debugger command, R.
4739It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4740in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4741
4742** Frame-local variables.
4743
4744You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4745the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4746local bindings for that variable.
4747
4748These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4749frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4750modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4751parameter name.
4752
4753Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4754Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4755active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4756that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4757
4758It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4759clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4760very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4761through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4762
4763** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4764"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4765evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4766makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4767See the documentation in sregex.el.
4768
4769** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4770is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4771parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4772The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4773
4774** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4775If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4776
4777** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4778known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4779define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4780
4781** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4782when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4783it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4784history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4785
4786The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4787return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4788empty input.
4789
4790** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4791for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4792`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4793Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4794`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4795
4796** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4797echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4798a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4799default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4800
4801** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4802specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4803function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4804place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4805non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4806
4807** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4808If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4809up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4810end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4811
4812** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4813which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4814If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4815
4816** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4817holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4818was directed to display this buffer.
4819
4820** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4821with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4822describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4823other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4824set-window-configuration.
4825
4826** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4827window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4828positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4829windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4830
4831** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4832override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4833look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4834
4835If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4836non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4837map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4838
4839minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4840and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4841
4842** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4843except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4844
4845** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4846USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4847floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4848
4849** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4850to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4851in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4852it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4853
4854** Menu changes
4855
4856*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4857keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4858better supported.
4859
4860The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4861a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4862you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4863can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4864then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4865
4866*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4867
4868In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4869 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4870defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4871starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4872
4873The format is:
4874 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4875 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4876where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4877string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4878The supported properties include
4879
4880:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4881 item is enabled.
4882:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4883 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4884:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4885 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4886 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4887 It should return a binding to use instead.
4888:keys DESCRIPTION
4889 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4890 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4891 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4892:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4893 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4894 keyboard binding.
4895:key-sequence nil
4896 This means that the command normally has no
4897 keyboard equivalent.
4898:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4899:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4900 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4901 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4902 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4903
4904Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4905Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4906
4907(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4908
4909** New event types
4910
4911*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4912mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4913corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4914which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4915
4916 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4917
4918where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4919same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4920indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4921negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4922the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4923forward, away from the user.
4924
4925As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4926
4927*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4928files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4929and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4930filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4931loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4932
4933 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4934
4935where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4936same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4937that were dragged and dropped.
4938
4939As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4940
4941** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4942
4943*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4944any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4945to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4946
4947*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4948can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4949that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4950
4951*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4952in Emacs 19 and before.
4953
4954The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4955The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4956
4957*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4958buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4959unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4960representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4961
4962This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4963as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4964viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4965one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4966will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4967
4968This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4969representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4970(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4971consistent with the new representation.
4972
4973*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4974representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4975about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4976however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4977
4978The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4979nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4980using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4981
4982*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4983representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4984representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4985
4986The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4987loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4988is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4989
4990*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4991which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4992
4993*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4994which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4995
4996*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4997portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4998so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4999You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5000
5001*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5002it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5003
5004*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5005convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5006buffer or string being searched.
5007
5008One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5009[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5010searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5011searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5012obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5013you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5014expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5015
5016*** Structure of coding system changed.
5017
5018All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5019by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5020which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5021as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5022vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5023your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5024define-coding-system-alias.
5025
5026The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5027the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5028access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5029pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5030character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5031safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5032'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5033`iso-8859-1'.
5034
5035Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5036The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5037coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5038(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5039
5040Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5041also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5042are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5043the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5044
5045*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5046proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5047This function requires a user interaction.
5048
5049*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5050find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5051select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5052systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5053a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5054select-safe-coding-system.
5055
5056*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5057decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5058last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5059was done.
5060
5061*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5062used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5063coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5064
5065*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5066return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5067characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5068`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5069
5070*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5071coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5072coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5073converted.
5074
5075*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5076coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5077
5078*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5079character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5080character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5081each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5082either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5083range of characters.
5084
5085*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5086Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5087
5088*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5089in the current buffer at position POS.
5090
5091*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5092input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5093function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5094character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5095event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5096binding input-method-function to nil.
5097
5098The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5099method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5100input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5101the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5102not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5103
5104The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5105subsequent events of a key sequence.
5106
5107*** You can customize any language environment by using
5108set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5109
5110The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5111customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5112instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5113environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5114exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5115\f
5116* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5117
5118** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5119options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5120at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5121tree structure.
5122
5123M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5124user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5125
5126With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5127session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5128in your .emacs file.)
5129
5130** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5131You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5132
5133** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5134This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5135
5136** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5137immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5138kills the region.
5139
5140The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5141delete the character before point, as usual.
5142
5143** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5144on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5145by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5146
5147** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5148insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5149the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5150onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5151history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5152past.)
5153
5154** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5155This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5156in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5157TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5158makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5159
5160As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5161and is an alias for it.
5162
5163If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5164use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5165
5166** Scrolling changes
5167
5168*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5169position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5170
5171In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5172on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5173where it started.
5174
5175*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5176move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5177screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5178does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5179
5180*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5181top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5182comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5183recenters the window.
5184
5185** International character set support (MULE)
5186
5187Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5188including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5189Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5190Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5191features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5192MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5193
5194Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5195coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5196character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5197variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5198into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5199
5200Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5201generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5202supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5203language, to make it possible to type them.
5204
5205The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5206character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5207
5208The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5209to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5210
5211You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5212
5213 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5214
5215Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5216characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5217argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5218already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5219characters for their work until they want to change.
5220
5221*** Input methods
5222
5223An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5224specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5225has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5226the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5227support several input methods.
5228
5229The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5230another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5231work.
5232
5233A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5234characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5235composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5236consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5237sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5238letter.
5239
5240The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5241by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5242First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5243marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5244mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5245
5246None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5247they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5248phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5249converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5250
5251Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5252word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5253typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5254the first guess is wrong.
5255
5256*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5257turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5258
5259If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5260byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5261they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5262the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5263
5264However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5265use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5266includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5267translate automatically to and from either one.
5268
5269*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5270
5271Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5272file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5273sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5274what you want.
5275
5276If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5277example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5278system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5279multibyte characters in that buffer.
5280
5281If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5282character conversion as well.
5283
5284*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5285
5286A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5287Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5288requires using many fonts.
5289
5290Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5291collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5292
5293A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5294the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5295have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5296you would use a font.
5297
5298If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5299specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5300display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5301
5302The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5303(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5304characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5305or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5306and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5307
5308*** Defining fontsets.
5309
5310Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5311chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5312with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5313
5314Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5315of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5316`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5317standard fontset are created automatically.
5318
5319If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5320argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5321FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5322with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5323name is `fontset-startup'.
5324
5325Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5326The resource value should have this form:
5327 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5328FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5329 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5330 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5331 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5332The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5333of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5334CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5335FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5336
5337Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5338last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5339You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5340
5341For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5342font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5343following resource,
5344 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5345the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5346 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5347Here is the substitution rule:
5348 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5349 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5350 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5351 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5352 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5353
5354The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5355fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5356that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5357
5358With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5359like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5360name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5361fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5362fontsets.
5363
5364*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5365defaults for a particular choice of language.
5366
5367Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5368method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5369visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5370already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5371language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5372system for new files that you create.
5373
5374It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5375set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5376whole Emacs session.
5377
5378For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5379chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5380with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5381
5382*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5383specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5384specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5385the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5386coding systems that Emacs supports.
5387
5388*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5389lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5390This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5391After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5392is used for *the immediately following command*.
5393
5394So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5395write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5396
5397If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5398then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5399
5400For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5401visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5402
5403*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5404construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5405to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5406specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5407of the file.
5408
5409*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5410the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5411code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5412translated into that character code.
5413
5414This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5415various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5416
5417By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5418
5419*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5420the coding system for keyboard input.
5421
5422Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5423with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5424some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5425
5426By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5427
5428Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5429input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5430translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5431to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5432designed to work with terminals.
5433
5434*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5435specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5436This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5437has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5438translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5439in the corresponding buffer.
5440
5441By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5442
5443*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5444to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5445It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5446
5447*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5448an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5449command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5450want to use.
5451
5452C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5453method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5454
5455*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5456layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5457remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5458which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5459
5460*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5461the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5462related information.
5463
5464*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5465HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5466scripts.
5467
5468*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5469information about the support for a particular language.
5470You specify the language as an argument.
5471
5472*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5473the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5474first dash.
5475
5476A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5477(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5478whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
54791 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5480
5481 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5482 B big5 (Chinese)
5483 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5484 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5485 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5486 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5487 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5488 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5489 K euc-korea (Korean)
5490 R koi8 (Russian)
5491 Q tibetan
5492 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5493 T lao
5494 T tis620 (Thai)
5495 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5496 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5497 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5498 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5499 z hz (Chinese)
5500
5501When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5502two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5503coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5504keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5505
5506*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5507conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5508
5509When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5510into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5511rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5512Rmail files themselves.
5513
5514*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5515conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5516
5517Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5518for sending mail:
5519
5520- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5521- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5522- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5523 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5524- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5525
5526*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5527to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5528Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5529translations.
5530
5531** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5532of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5533insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5534without any conversion.
5535
5536** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5537You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5538RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5539any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5540
5541** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5542functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5543
5544Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5545Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5546
5547Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5548mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5549
5550** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5551complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5552in the buffer before point.
5553
5554With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5555symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5556you are using.
5557
5558With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5559just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5560
5561** File locking works with NFS now.
5562
5563The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5564in the same directory as FILENAME.
5565
5566This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5567works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5568can become a bottleneck.
5569
5570The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5571does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5572create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5573file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5574rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5575so useful that the change is worth while.
5576
5577When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5578are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5579collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5580tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5581
5582** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5583it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5584show-paren-mode.
5585
5586** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5587selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5588delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5589
5590** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5591within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5592complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5593
5594** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5595it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5596set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5597
5598** Changes in View mode.
5599
5600*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5601Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5602
5603*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5604view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5605
5606*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5607previous state.
5608
5609*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5610scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5611
5612*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5613non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5614not just the selected window.
5615
5616*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5617read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5618turns View mode on or off.
5619
5620*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5621how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5622delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5623
5624** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5625now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5626
5627** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5628has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5629presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5630which version to compare with.
5631
5632** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5633blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5634
5635The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5636is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5637isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5638shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5639
5640By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5641of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5642blocks, all of them or none.
5643
5644** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5645current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5646confirmation first.
5647
5648** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5649now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5650However, the mode will not be changed if
5651(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5652(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5653 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5654(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5655
5656This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5657
5658However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5659these commands do not change the major mode.
5660
5661** M-x occur changes.
5662
5663*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5664it performs a case-sensitive search.
5665
5666*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5667if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5668using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5669
5670** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5671in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5672window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5673that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5674buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5675
5676** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5677after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5678appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5679come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5680
5681** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5682selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5683buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5684
5685** Outline mode changes.
5686
5687*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5688
5689*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5690
5691** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5692you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5693Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5694was already active.
5695
5696The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5697unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5698get confused by it.
5699
5700If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5701set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5702
5703** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5704
5705*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5706conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5707character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5708including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5709
5710The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5711mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5712copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5713
5714*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5715are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5716values.
5717
5718`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5719case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5720`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5721case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5722
5723** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5724certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5725can be. The default value is 30.
5726
5727** Changes in Mail mode.
5728
5729*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5730Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5731composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5732`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5733`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5734behavior.
5735
5736C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5737compose-mail-other-frame.
5738
5739*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5740the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5741replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5742buffer that shows the original message.
5743
5744*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5745with separator lines around the contents.
5746
5747*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5748in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5749definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5750need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5751
5752*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5753
5754**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5755for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5756controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5757Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5758
5759**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5760to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5761/etc/passwd.
5762
5763**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5764to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5765/etc/passwd.
5766
5767** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5768special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5769directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5770reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5771
5772Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5773when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5774be taken to be magic.
5775
5776** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5777files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5778available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5779
5780M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5781(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5782
5783** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5784suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5785
5786In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5787
5788new key dired.el binding old key
5789------- ---------------- -------
5790 * c dired-change-marks c
5791 * m dired-mark m
5792 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5793 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5794 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5795 * u dired-unmark u
5796 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5797 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5798 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5799 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5800 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5801 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5802
5803** Rmail changes.
5804
5805*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5806saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5807chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5808each time you run it.
5809
5810*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5811whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5812
5813*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5814messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5815means to move in the opposite direction.
5816
5817*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5818you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5819
5820*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5821just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5822It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5823can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5824for output.
5825
5826** Gnus changes.
5827
5828*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5829
79214ddf
FP
5830*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5831Gnus.
a933dad1 5832
79214ddf 5833*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5834`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5835
5836*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5837article mode line.
5838
5839*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5840
5841*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5842
5843(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5844
5845*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5846are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5847`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5848
5849*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5850
5851*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5852
5853*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5854See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5855
5856*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5857Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5858used to pick articles.
5859
5860*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5861another have been added.
5862
5863 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5864
5865*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5866generating lines in buffers.
5867
5868*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5869`M-C-_'.
5870
5871*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5872
5873*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5874
5875 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5876
5877*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5878
a933dad1
DL
5879 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5880
5881*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5882Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5883
5884*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5885the native server.
5886
5887 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5888
5889*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5890(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5891
5892*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5893
5894*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5895even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5896
5897*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5898(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5899
5900 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5901 a group.
5902
5903*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5904sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5905
5906 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5907
5908*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5909
5910 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5911
5912*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5913
a933dad1
DL
5914 Use the `Y c' command.
5915
5916*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5917
5918*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5919
5920 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5921
5922*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5923from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5924
a933dad1
DL
5925 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5926
5927*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5928
5929*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5930the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5931
5932 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5933
5934Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5935and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5936from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5937hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5938this issue.)
5939
5940Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5941automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5942particular news group. This can be done by:
5943
5944 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5945
5946Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5947of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5948"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5949system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5950for reading and posting).
5951
5952CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5953 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5954Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5955newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5956there.
5957
5958Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5959default. Here are some of these default settings:
5960
5961 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5962 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5963 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5964 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5965 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5966
5967When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5968the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5969
5970** CC mode changes.
5971
5972*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5973code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5974values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5975this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5976Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5977loaded.
5978
5979If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5980Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5981style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5982share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5983c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5984must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5985
5986*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5987of the current buffer.
5988
5989*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5990it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5991of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5992
5993*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5994style that the Python developers like.
5995
5996*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5997This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5998just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5999
6000** VC Changes [new]
6001
6002** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6003name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6004directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6005
6006This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6007master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6008developers.
6009
6010You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6011RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6012
6013*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6014other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6015writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6016calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6017
6018*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6019version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6020
6021** Calendar changes.
6022
6023A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6024of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6025for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6026
6027** ps-print changes
6028
79214ddf 6029There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
6030
6031*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6032
6033The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6034formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6035`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6036`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6037It defaults to `letter'.
6038If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6039
6040The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 6041of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
6042non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6043
6044The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6045It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 6046It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
6047
6048*** Horizontal layout
6049
6050The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6051`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6052All are measured in points.
6053
6054*** Vertical layout
6055
6056The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6057`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6058All are measured in points.
6059
6060*** Headers
6061
6062If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6063`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6064margin above the text.
6065
79214ddf 6066If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
6067framing box is printed around the header.
6068
6069The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6070`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6071
79214ddf
FP
6072The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6073`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
6074`ps-header-font-size'.
6075
6076*** Font managing
6077
6078The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6079used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6080`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6081elements to this alist.
6082
79214ddf 6083The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
6084for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6085
6086** hideshow changes.
6087
6088*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 6089C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
6090
6091*** Support for java-mode added.
6092
6093*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6094in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6095
6096*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6097the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6098way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6099
6100*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6101robust and a lot faster.
6102
79214ddf 6103*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
6104
6105*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6106to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6107documentation for more details.
6108
6109** Changes in Enriched mode.
6110
6111*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6112filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6113of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6114use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6115the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6116
6117*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6118distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6119as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6120as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6121
6122** Font Lock mode
6123
6124*** Custom support
6125
6126The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6127font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6128faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6129group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6130your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6131consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6132
6133You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6134
6135*** Maximum decoration
6136
6137Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6138default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6139of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6140supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6141to get the old behavior.
6142
6143*** New support
6144
6145Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6146
6147Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6148support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6149
6150*** Configurable support
6151
6152Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6153additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6154c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6155java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6156list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6157of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6158convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6159
6160Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6161way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6162it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6163
6164*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6165
6166You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6167highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6168for any mode.
6169
6170For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6171
6172 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6173
6174in your ~/.emacs.
6175
6176*** New faces
6177
6178Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6179font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6180distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6181to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6182
6183*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6184
6185The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6186cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6187same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6188
6189*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6190
6191The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6192according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6193the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6194non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6195refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6196the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6197Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6198
6199This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6200For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6201this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6202refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6203containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6204the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6205
6206As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6207
6208Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6209Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6210Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6211new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6212
6213If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6214settings.
6215
6216** Ada mode changes.
6217
6218*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6219If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6220procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6221you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6222stubs.
6223
6224*** There are two new commands:
6225 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6226 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6227
6228The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6229`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 6230`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
6231
6232*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6233is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6234Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6235
6236*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6237formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6238places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6239space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6240
6241** Scheme mode changes.
6242
6243*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6244mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6245for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6246with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6247have any effect.
6248
6249If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6250still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6251scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6252variables as buffer-local variables.
6253
6254*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6255Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6256
133c9e59
GM
6257** Changes to the emacsclient program
6258
875c1439
GM
6259*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6260USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6261associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6262can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6263
133c9e59 6264*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
6265it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6266buffer in Emacs.
6267
133c9e59
GM
6268*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6269use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6270ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6271option takes precedence.
6272
a933dad1
DL
6273** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6274constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6275(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6276
6277** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6278which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6279the current defun.
6280
6281** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6282following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6283
6284** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6285and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6286necessary).
6287
6288** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6289if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6290these register values no longer become completely useless.
6291If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6292asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6293it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6294
6295** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6296example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6297be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6298you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6299
6300You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6301variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6302file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6303revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6304only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6305
6306** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6307since it applies only to the current frame.
6308
6309** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6310file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6311and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6312
6313This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6314multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6315variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6316tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6317instead of just the file you are editing.
6318
6319** RefTeX mode
6320
6321RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6322and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6323different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6324multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6325turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6326
79214ddf 6327C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
6328 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6329 knows which kind of label is needed.
6330
6331C-c ) reftex-reference
6332 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6333 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6334
6335C-c [ reftex-citation
6336 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6337 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6338
6339C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6340 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6341
6342C-c = reftex-toc
6343 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6344 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 6345
a933dad1
DL
6346Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6347commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6348Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6349reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6350C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6351
6352** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6353
6354*** Info documentation is now available.
6355
6356*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6357both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6358
6359*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6360bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6361
6362*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6363(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6364
6365*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6366entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6367appropriate functions.
6368
6369*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6370entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6371
6372*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6373been cleaned.
6374
6375*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6376bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6377
6378*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6379shall be delimited.
6380
6381*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6382bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6383bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6384
6385*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6386field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6387prefixed with `ALT'.
6388
6389*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6390bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6391formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6392documentation).
6393
6394*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6395documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6396for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6397
6398*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6399comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6400
6401*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6402alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6403signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6404
6405*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6406
6407*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6408
6409*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6410from alien sources.
6411
6412*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6413to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6414crossref entries.
6415
6416*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6417region.
6418
6419*** Added support for imenu.
6420
6421*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6422of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6423`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6424`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6425
6426*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6427from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6428
6429** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6430
30a009a5 6431** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6432
a933dad1
DL
6433** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6434functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6435Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6436as an argument.
6437
6438When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6439and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6440
6441** browse-url changes
6442
6443*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6444Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6445(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6446non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6447customization variables.
6448
6449*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6450
6451*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6452lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6453(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6454
6455** Changes in Ediff
6456
6457*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6458pops up the Info file for this command.
6459
6460*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6461the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6462merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6463directories).
6464
6465*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6466and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6467files in the same directory.
6468
6469*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6470The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6471related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6472
6473** Changes in Viper
6474
6475*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6476*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6477 instead of vip-.
6478*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6479*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6480Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6481*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6482*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6483*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6484color when Viper is in insert state.
6485*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6486Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6487viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6488
6489** Etags changes.
6490
6491*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6492default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6493Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6494variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6495not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6496
6497*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6498
6499*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6500constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6501
6502*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6503recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6504In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6505
6506*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6507C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6508recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6509methods and protocols.
6510
6511*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6512.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6513column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6514paragraph name.
6515
6516*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6517an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6518at least M times and as many as N times.
6519
6520** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6521in files has changed slightly.
6522
6523With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6524time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6525This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6526with old time-stamp-format values.
6527
6528In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6529(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6530This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6531reasons.
6532
6533In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6534natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6535fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6536(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6537time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6538specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6539
6540Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6541case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6542truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6543
6544The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6545being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6546future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6547recommended now will continue to work then.
6548
6549See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6550details.
6551
6552** There are some additional major modes:
6553
6554dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6555m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6556meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6557
6558** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6559copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6560into Emacs.
6561
6562** New Lisp packages include:
6563
6564*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6565
6566*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6567be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6568
6569*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6570
6571*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6572in shell buffers.
6573
6574*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6575See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6576and `elint-defun'.
6577
6578*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6579meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6580ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6581strings or comments.
6582
6583These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6584abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6585you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6586insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6587at these points.
6588
6589*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6590can visit them by short forms of their names.
6591
6592*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6593Emacs Lisp function at point.
6594
6595*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6596
6597*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6598switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6599
6600*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6601
6602*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6603
6604*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6605
6606*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6607from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6608
6609*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6610You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6611inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6612original place after inserting the copy.
6613
6614*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6615on the buffer.
6616
6617You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6618velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6619(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6620
6621Enable mouse-drag with:
6622 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6623-or-
6624 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6625
6626*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6627mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6628
6629*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6630It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6631
6632*** ogonek
6633
6634The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6635Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6636platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6637TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6638ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6639prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6640instance) and vice versa.
6641
6642To use this package load it using
6643 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6644Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6645 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6646 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6647The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6648ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6649
6650*** Interface to ph.
6651
6652Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6653
6654The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6655services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6656these servers.
6657
6658*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6659
6660*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6661You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6662while the real cursor does not move.
6663
6664*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6665for visiting your favorite web sites.
6666
6667*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6668so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6669
6670** movemail change
6671
6672Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6673mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6674supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6675user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6676
6677This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6678\f
6679* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6680
6681** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6682
6683Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6684end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6685Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6686file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6687file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6688
6689To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6690C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6691coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6692specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6693LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6694save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6695\f
6696* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6697
6698** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6699Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6700vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6701Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6702
6703** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6704to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6705
6706In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6707don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6708"win".
6709
6710** Basic Lisp changes
6711
6712*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6713evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6714
6715*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6716be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6717or by the user.
6718
6719The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6720
6721*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6722
6723(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6724(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6725
6726*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6727usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6728its argument.
6729
6730*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6731
6732*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6733
6734*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6735
6736*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6737error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6738include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6739`format' function.
6740
6741*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6742or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6743whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6744
6745*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6746either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6747adding one of these suffixes.
6748
6749*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6750which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6751If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6752
6753We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6754because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6755
6756*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6757
6758*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6759You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6760
6761*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6762conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6763
6764 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6765
6766BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6767BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6768
6769*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6770choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6771restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6772works using `save-current-buffer'.
6773
6774*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6775write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6776of the last form.
6777
6778*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6779which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6780last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6781as the last form.
6782
6783*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6784characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6785matches.
6786
6787For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6788
6789*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6790with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6791Then it returns that string.
6792
6793For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6794
6795(with-output-to-string
6796 (princ "The buffer is ")
6797 (princ (buffer-name)))
6798
6799returns "The buffer is foo".
6800
6801** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6802is non-nil.
6803
6804These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6805buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6806characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6807
6808*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6809a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6810
6811Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6812character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6813Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6814position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6815characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6816 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6817
6818ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6819Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6820non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6821characters".
6822
6823The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6824through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6825"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6826range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6827leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6828
6829*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6830(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6831multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6832character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6833
6834This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6835always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6836
6837However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6838
a933dad1
DL
6839*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6840because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6841have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6842the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6843guaranteed.
6844
6845*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6846between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6847character).
6848
6849When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6850
6851 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6852 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6853 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6854 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6855 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6856
6857*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6858
6859*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6860`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6861more than the number of characters.
6862
6863You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6864it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6865\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6866is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6867follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6868newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6869
6870*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6871and returns a string containing those characters.
6872
6873*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6874(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6875counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6876character, sref signals an error.
6877
6878*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6879in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6880string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6881
6882*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6883in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6884region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6885
6886*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6887the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6888to a vector of the characters in it.
6889
6890*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6891of a string. You call it as follows:
6892
6893 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6894
6895This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6896STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6897This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6898Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6899it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6900
6901*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6902if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6903
6904*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6905if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6906
6907*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6908to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6909not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6910which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6911
6912(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6913
6914This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6915
6916The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6917If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6918are not included in the resulting value.
6919
6920The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6921at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6922WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6923is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6924
6925If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6926place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6927character extends across that column), then the padding character
6928PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6929string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6930column START-COLUMN.
6931
6932*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6933the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6934necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6935difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6936changed text, before the change.
6937
6938*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6939sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6940one character set for each script, not for each language.
6941
6942**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6943
6944**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6945
6946**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6947set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6948
6949**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6950name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6951which identify the character within that character set.
6952
6953**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6954byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6955opposite of split-char.
6956
6957**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6958of all the characters between BEG and END.
6959
6960**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6961of all the characters in a string.
6962
6963*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6964and specifying coding systems.
6965
6966**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6967system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6968of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6969(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6970and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6971as what to do about code conversion.)
6972
6973**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6974name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6975
6976**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6977for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6978except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6979
6980Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6981which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6982to match against a file name.
6983
6984VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6985a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6986decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6987to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6988systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6989specifies the coding system for encoding.
6990
6991If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6992or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6993
6994**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6995the coding system to use for network sockets.
6996
6997Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6998which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6999either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7000service names.
7001
7002VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7003a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7004decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7005to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7006systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7007specifies the coding system for encoding.
7008
7009If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7010or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7011
7012**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7013for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7014except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7015start the subprocess.
7016
7017**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7018systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7019when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7020(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7021to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7022
7023**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7024coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7025subprocess.
7026
7027It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7028but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7029start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7030connection permanently or until overridden.
7031
7032The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7033file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7034network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7035coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7036It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7037system for one operation at a time.
7038
7039**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7040files, subprocesses or network connections.
7041
7042**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7043coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7044The value is a cons cell,
7045 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7046where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7047the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7048input to the subprocess.
7049
7050**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7051change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7052
7053** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7054customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7055you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7056
7057You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7058variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7059information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7060legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7061customization.
7062
7063Thus, instead of writing
7064
7065 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7066 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7067
7068you would now write this:
7069
7070 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7071 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7072 :type 'boolean
7073 :group foo)
7074
7075The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7076two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7077describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7078for a description of them.
7079
7080The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7081should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7082
7083 (defgroup ispell nil
7084 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7085 :group 'processes)
7086
7087The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7088group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7089but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7090to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7091second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7092
7093Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7094package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7095have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7096package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7097first-level subgroups.
7098
7099** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7100
7101This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7102separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7103
7104** easy-mmode
7105
7106The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7107developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7108only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7109predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7110`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7111`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7112
7113** Text property changes
7114
7115*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7116text property.
7117
7118*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7119previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7120place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7121functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7122starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7123
7124If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7125LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7126of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7127position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7128
7129*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7130value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7131is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7132
7133** Changes in invisibility features
7134
7135*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7136hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7137is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7138should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7139would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7140make the overlay visible.
7141
7142During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7143invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7144needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7145which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7146the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7147t when it should hide it.
7148
7149*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7150
7151Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
7152invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7153and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 7154Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 7155manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
7156Here is an example of how to do this:
7157
7158 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 7159 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 7160 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 7161 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
7162
7163 ...
7164 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7165
7166 ...
7167 ;; When done with the overlays:
7168 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7169 ;; Or respectively:
7170 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7171
7172** Changes in syntax parsing.
7173
7174*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7175`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7176obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7177`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7178
7179If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7180is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7181used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7182
7183When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7184character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7185
7186 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7187 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7188
7189 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7190 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7191 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7192
7193 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7194 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7195 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7196 determine the syntax type of the character.
7197
7198 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7199 of the current buffer.
7200
7201*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7202value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7203for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7204
7205*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7206and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7207only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7208character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7209another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7210
7211These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7212text property.
7213
7214*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7215arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7216of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7217
7218*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7219(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7220element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7221nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7222string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7223
7224*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7225syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7226`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7227
7228** Changes in face features
7229
7230*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7231if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7232
7233*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7234of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7235
7236*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7237set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7238
7239*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7240set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7241
7242*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7243by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7244and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7245the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7246overlay property).
7247
7248This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7249arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7250
7251** Changes in file-handling functions
7252
7253*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7254directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7255they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7256is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7257
7258This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7259begins with ~.
7260
7261*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7262it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7263
7264*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7265the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7266
7267*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7268as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7269
7270*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7271character code conversion as well as other things.
7272
7273Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7274(formerly it did not).
7275
7276*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7277environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7278
7279*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7280instead of constant strings.
7281
7282*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7283to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7284any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7285
7286substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7287in the same way as before.
7288
7289*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7290The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7291which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7292
7293*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7294error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7295else, and returns nil.
7296
7297*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7298directory cannot be listed.
7299
7300** Changes in minibuffer input
7301
7302*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7303read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7304additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7305argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7306ways:
7307
7308 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7309 It is available through the history command M-n.
7310
7311*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7312read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7313argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7314minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7315enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7316
7317In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7318argument in this way.
7319
7320*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7321from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7322minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7323
7324** Echo area features
7325
7326*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7327echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7328minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7329after the echo area is cleared.
7330
7331*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7332in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7333
7334** Keyboard input features
7335
7336*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7337set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7338
7339*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7340received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7341by keyboard macros.
7342
7343** Frame-related changes
7344
7345*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7346creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7347hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7348
7349*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7350the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7351has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7352
7353*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7354selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7355value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7356in the selected frame.
7357
7358*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7359is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7360which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7361
7362** X Windows features
7363
7364*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7365x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7366x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7367
7368*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7369The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7370
7371*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7372MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7373A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7374
7375If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7376it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7377
7378** Subprocess features
7379
7380*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7381functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7382automatically.
7383
7384*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7385and returns the output from the command as a string.
7386
7387*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7388and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7389
7390** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7391does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7392
7393** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7394at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7395goes after the other menu items.
7396
7397** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7398of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7399around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7400are in use.
7401
7402The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7403series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7404
7405Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7406after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7407form.
7408
7409** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7410is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7411but its hook is still run.
7412
7413** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7414for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7415
7416If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7417regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7418useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7419
7420This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7421are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7422filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7423warned.
7424
7425** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7426way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7427
7428** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7429integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7430functions like display-time.
7431
7432** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7433name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7434
7435** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7436can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7437is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7438
7439** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7440if there is an error in compilation.
7441
7442** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7443switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7444argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7445they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7446
7447** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7448Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7449the *scratch* buffer.
7450
7451** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7452The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7453where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7454e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7455
7456** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7457and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7458It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7459
7460** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7461using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7462variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7463and compose-mail-other-frame.
7464
7465** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7466can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7467full name of the specified user will be returned.
7468
7469** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7470of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7471where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7472in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7473option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7474files at all.
7475
7476** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7477and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7478width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7479the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7480
7481For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7482minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7483with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7484is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7485
7486** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7487
7488** imenu.el changes.
7489
7490You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7491item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7492
7493An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7494#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7495select one of those items.
7496\f
7497* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7498\f
7499* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7500
7501** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7502mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7503
7504** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7505use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7506Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7507\f
7508* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7509
7510** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7511To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7512
7513** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7514conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7515matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7516expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7517word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7518all caps.
7519
7520** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7521at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7522
7523When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7524does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7525as in previous Emacs versions.
7526
7527** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7528non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7529time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7530frames.
7531
7532** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7533if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7534This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7535Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7536accident.
7537
7538** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7539keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7540It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7541line and then executing the macro.
7542
7543This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7544
7545** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7546(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7547characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7548characters.
7549
7550** Font Lock mode
7551
7552*** Font Lock support modes
7553
7554Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7555below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7556hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7557to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7558Font Lock mode is enabled.
7559
7560For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7561
7562 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7563
7564in your ~/.emacs.
7565
7566*** lazy-lock
7567
7568The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7569only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7570becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7571Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7572occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7573buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7574Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7575
7576To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7577
7578 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7579
7580To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7581
7582** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7583
7584*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7585paren and key.
7586
7587*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7588supported.
7589
7590** Gnus changes.
7591
7592Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7593commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7594significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7595previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7596
7597Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7598between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7599
79214ddf 7600*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7601variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7602obsolete.
7603
7604*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7605missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7606
7607 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7608
7609*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7610
7611 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7612
7613*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7614referred.
a933dad1
DL
7615
7616*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7617
7618 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7619
7620*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7621
7622 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7623
7624*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7625buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7626
7627 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7628
7629*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7630
7631 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7632
7633*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7634
7635 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7636
7637*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7638
7639 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7640
7641*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7642is possible.
7643
7644 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7645
7646*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7647groups of groups.
7648
7649*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7650
7651*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7652batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7653
7654*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7655
7656*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7657
7658*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7659
7660 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7661
7662*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7663expiration times.
7664
7665*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7666
7667*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7668process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7669
7670*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7671articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7672bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7673
7674*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7675articles with the `*' command.
7676
7677*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7678
7679*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7680
7681 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7682
7683*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7684
79214ddf 7685*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7686`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7687
7688*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7689buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7690
7691*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7692
7693*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7694
7695*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7696
7697 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7698
79214ddf 7699*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7700
7701 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7702
79214ddf 7703*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7704
7705*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7706
79214ddf 7707*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7708
79214ddf 7709 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7710 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7711
7712*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7713refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7714
7715 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7716
7717*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7718buffer to allow easier treatment.
7719
7720*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7721
7722*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7723
7724 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7725
7726*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7727articles.
a933dad1
DL
7728
7729 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7730
79214ddf 7731*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7732
7733*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7734cited text to hide is now customizable.
7735
7736 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7737
7738*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7739
7740 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7741
7742*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7743
7744*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7745
7746The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7747in greater detail.
7748\f
7749* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7750
7751** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7752second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7753asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7754exists.
7755
7756** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7757as well as lists.
7758
7759** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7760of a given keymap.
7761
7762** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7763given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7764keymap or nil.
7765
7766** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7767an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7768name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7769menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7770equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7771alias.
7772\f
7773* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7774
7775** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7776
7777Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7778This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7779was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7780far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7781pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7782
7783For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7784you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7785`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7786
7787** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7788
7789The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7790do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7791It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7792much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7793chapter of the manual for details.
7794
7795However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7796customization variables take effect.
7797
7798** Marking with the mouse.
7799
7800When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7801highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7802using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7803
7804** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7805
7806*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7807
7808*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7809to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7810
7811*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7812in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7813you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7814application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7815applications, these problems are significant.
7816
7817If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7818likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7819However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7820will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7821other DOS application as a subprocess.
7822
7823Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7824You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7825
7826If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7827subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7828have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7829Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7830separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7831Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7832
7833** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7834
7835This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7836which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7837minibuffer contains.
7838
7839** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7840
7841The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7842It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7843It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7844affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7845
7846The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7847it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7848and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7849when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7850
7851** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7852enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7853
7854** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7855F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7856Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7857
7858If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7859menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7860something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7861the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7862
7863 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7864
7865** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7866to replace the characters it "deletes".
7867
7868** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7869
7870** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7871a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7872select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7873It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7874immediately after the selected one.
7875
7876This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7877made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7878
7879** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7880
7881Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7882directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7883If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7884Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7885recover-session.
7886
7887You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7888auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7889will not work.
7890
7891Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7892normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7893this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7894bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7895now that the bug is fixed.
7896
7897** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7898
7899There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7900when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7901Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7902which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7903
7904If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7905telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7906VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7907the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7908
7909** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7910Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7911is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7912
7913There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7914Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7915enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7916The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7917remain normal.
7918
7919** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7920header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7921
7922Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7923known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7924offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7925Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7926
7927Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7928of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7929a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7930name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7931documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7932`mail-directory-stream'.)
7933
7934** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7935skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7936characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7937with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7938
7939Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7940- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7941wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7942
7943The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7944less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7945headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7946Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7947Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7948fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7949to a limitation in font-lock).
7950
7951External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7952
7953** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7954buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7955buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7956this example:
7957
7958 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7959 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7960
7961** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7962
7963*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7964
7965*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7966
7967*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7968
7969*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7970entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7971will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7972isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7973(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7974The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7975
7976*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7977does the same job.
7978
7979*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7980"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7981
7982*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7983text.
7984
7985** Font Lock mode
7986
7987*** Global Font Lock mode
7988
7989Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7990new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7991font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7992turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7993on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7994
7995For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7996
7997 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7998
7999in your ~/.emacs.
8000
8001*** Local Refontification
8002
8003In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8004However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8005those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8006command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8007
8008In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8009(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8010current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8011above and below point.
8012
8013With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8014
8015** Follow mode
8016
8017Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8018buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8019side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8020they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8021split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8022follow-mode.
8023
8024M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8025
8026To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8027command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8028
8029** hide-show changes.
8030
8031The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8032to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8033normal hooks.
8034
8035** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8036The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8037
8038** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8039recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8040those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8041
8042** MSDOS Changes
8043
8044*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8045Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8046
8047*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8048and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8049
8050*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8051
8052*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8053pressing both mouse buttons.
8054
8055*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8056restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 8057are:
a933dad1
DL
8058
8059**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8060now works.
8061
8062**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8063
8064**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8065implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8066
8067**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8068
8069**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8070
8071**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8072
8073**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8074
8075**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8076\f
8077* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8078
8079** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8080tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8081remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8082this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8083behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8084
8085** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8086
8087The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8088not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8089need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8090be different.
8091
8092It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8093than `system-type'.
8094
8095See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8096
8097** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8098now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8099
8100** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8101that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8102
8103** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8104no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8105reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8106
8107The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8108to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8109like this:
8110
8111 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8112
8113SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8114It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8115becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8116
8117REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8118seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8119means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8120
8121*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8122up if too much time passes.
8123
8124 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8125
8126This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8127If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8128of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8129form in BODY.
8130
8131*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8132a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8133call looks like this:
8134
8135 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8136
8137SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8138runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8139timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8140ARGS.
8141
8142Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8143command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8144command.
8145
8146REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8147time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8148does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8149each time Emacs becomes idle.
8150
8151If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8152idle for SECS seconds.
8153
8154*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8155all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8156programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8157instead.
8158
8159*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8160there is no answer within a certain time.
8161
8162 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8163
8164asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8165within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8166Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8167
8168** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8169arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8170meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8171arguments in between are ignored.
8172
8173This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8174the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8175
8176** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8177/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8178/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8179site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8180version.
8181
8182It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8183version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8184for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8185has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8186and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8187problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8188
8189** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8190.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8191systems with limited file name syntax.
8192
8193Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8194convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8195for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8196completions.el:
8197
8198(defvar save-completions-file-name
8199 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8200 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8201
8202This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8203depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8204convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8205Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8206MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8207
8208** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8209rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8210minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8211
8212** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8213marker from its buffer position.
8214
8215** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8216Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8217The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8218
8219** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8220that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8221condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8222of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8223matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8224regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8225
8226This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8227errors that happen often during editing.
8228
8229** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8230into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8231puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8232
8233** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8234now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8235
8236** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8237a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8238name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8239to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8240and not get-buffer-window.
8241
8242** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8243calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8244being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8245
8246If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8247buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8248property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8249non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8250are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8251property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8252over and over for the same text.
8253
8254** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8255
8256*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8257in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8258
8259;; @(#) HEADER: text
8260;; $HEADER: text $
8261
8262in addition to the normal
8263
8264;; HEADER: text
8265
8266*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8267checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8268lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8269\f
8270* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
8271
8272----------------------------------------------------------------------
8273Copyright information:
8274
404fa7d6 8275Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8276
8277 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8278 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8279 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8280 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8281
8282 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8283 of this document, or of portions of it,
8284 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8285 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8286\f
8287Local variables:
8288mode: outline
8289paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8290end: